1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN aa Вредностите кои се видливи во дијалогот ги ресетира во стандардните инсталациони вредности.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD aa Вредностите кои се видливи во дијалогот ги ресетира во стандардните инсталациони вредности.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 95 Променетите вредности повторно ги ресетира во вредностите стандардни за $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbfilterarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 45 Прикажува преглед на тековниот избор.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fassignrb 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatcol 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbprintarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
28 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fdefault aa Вредностите кои се видливи во дијалогот ги ресетира во стандардните инсталациони вредности.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fformulabutton 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdeldouble 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdelabbrev 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
23 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN 135 Промените направени во тековното ливче ги ресетира во вредностите применети кога дијалогот беше отворен. Не се појавува прашање за потврда кога го затворате дијалогот.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
2d modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fcatalogdialog%2Finsert 8c Ги применува изменетите или избраните вредности без затворање на дијалогот.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdataarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DEL 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatrow 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fdelete 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1a ui%2Fgradientpage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 45 Прикажува преглед на тековниот избор.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 5e Ги применува сите промени и го затвора волшебникот.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 5e Ги применува сите промени и го затвора волшебникот.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
23 hid%2Fcui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdelete 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdestarea 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fassign 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fvarbutton 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 6d Го ажурира прегледот во прозорецот или во избраниот објект.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 54 Овозможува да се преименува избраниот објект.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY 11e Го брише тековниот избор. Ако се избрани повеќе објекти, сите ќе бидат избришани. Најчесто, прашање за потврда се појавува пред да бидат избришани објектите.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 5c Го копира избраниот елемент во таблата за исечоци.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 64 Ја вметнува избраната слика како графика на подлогата.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 8d Го вметнува елементот што сте го пренеле во таблата со исечоци во документот.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 9a Стандардно, $[officename] ги вчитува и зачувува датотеките во форматот на датотека OpenDocument.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 9e Ви овозможува приказ на краток опис на менијата и иконите под покажувачот на глушецот.
e .uno%3AHelpTip b4 Ви овозможува приказ на имињата на икони и други содржини на Помошта на позицијата на покажувачот.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ белешките.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 26 Sizes the preview of the master pages.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 31 Поставување на резолуција.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel1rb d3 Компресија не е достапна на ова ниво. Изберете ја опцијата Ниво 1 ако вашиот PostScript-печатач не нуди можности за Ниво 2.
2d svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fsavetransparencycb 72 Одредува дали да ја зачува подлогата на сликата како проѕирна.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Finterlacedcb 74 Одредува дали графиката треба да се зачува во Режим преплетено.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftextcb 74 Одредува дали графиката треба да се зачува во Режим преплетено.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 67 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ графиките.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fbinarycb 74 Одредува дали графиката треба да се зачува во Режим преплетено.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 62 Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 6f Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ обележувачите.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 79 Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
2e svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf-nospin 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftiffpreviewcb b6 Одредува дали прегледуваната слика се изнесува во TIFF-формат заедно со моменталната PostScript-датотека.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fheightmf-nospin 27 Ја одредува висината.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fepsipreviewcb b4 Одредува дали прегледуваната еднобојна слика во EPSI-формат се изнесува заедно со PostScript-датотеката.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel2rb df Изберете ја опцијата Ниво 2 ако вашиот излезен уред поддржува битмапи во боја, слики со палета од бои и компресирани слики.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthlb 1b Selects the indicated path.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 31 Поставување на резолуција.
29 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf-nospin 31 Поставување на резолуција.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 96 Изберете го множеството знаци од опциите кои се користат за внесување/изнесување.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 61 Ги изнесува сите полиња со податоци со фиксна ширина.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 90 Изберете или внесете разделувач на текст, кој го опфаќа секое поле за податоци.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 9a Изберете или внесете го разделувачот на поле, кој ги разделува полињата со податоци.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 67 Го одредува множеството на знаци за изнесување на текст.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fdetectspecialnumbers 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fmergedelimiters 98 Комбинира последователни разделувачи и ги отстранува празните полиња со податоци.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Finputother 127 Ги одделува податоците во колони со користење на сопствен разделувач кој вие го одредувате. Забелешка: Сопствениот разделувач мора да постои во вашите податоци.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fother 127 Ги одделува податоците во колони со користење на сопствен разделувач кој вие го одредувате. Забелешка: Сопствениот разделувач мора да постои во вашите податоци.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fspace 6d Ги одделува податоците разделени со празни места во колони.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftextdelimiter 61 Изберете знак за разделување на текстуални податоци.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftab 6a Ги одделува податоците разделени со табулатори во колони.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcomma 64 Ги одделува податоците разделени со запирка во колони.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftoseparatedby 6d Изберете го разделувачот што се користи во вашите податоци.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftofixedwidth 7e Ги одделува податоците со фиксна ширина (ист број на знаци) во колони.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fsemicolon 72 Ги одделува податоците разделени со точка и запирка во колони.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ffromrow 72 Го одредува редот каде што сакате да започнете со внесувањето.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Flanguage 6a Ги одредува опциите за печатење за табеларните пресметки.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcharset b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcolumntype cf Изберете колона во прозорецот за преглед и изберете го типот на податоци кој ќе се примени на внесените податоци.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2FTextImportCsvDialog 6a Ги поставува опциите за внесување на ограничени податоци.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT e2 Одредува дека сѐ што се протега надвор од максималниот опсег за печатење ќе биде скратено и нема да се вклучи во печатењето.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 73 Одредува дали да се распредели отпечатокот на повеќе страници.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 73 Одредува дали да се распредели отпечатокот на повеќе страници.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 102 Дијалогот Предупредување за опции за печатење се појавува кога поставувањата на страница не се совпаѓаат со дефинираниот опсег за печатење.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flf 8f Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на ред, „Linefeed - LF“, како прелом на пасус.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcrlf 11b Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на пасус и почеток на нов, „Carriage Return - CR“, и знак со кој се обележува крај на ред, „Linefeed - LF“. Оваа опција е стандардна.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flanguage c8 Го одредува јазикот на текстот, ако тоа досега не е дефинирано. Ова поставување е достапно само при внесување.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcr b8 Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на пасус и почеток на нов, „Carriage Return - CR“, како прелом на пасус.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Ffont 123 Со поставување на стандарден фонт, вие одредувате дека текстот треба да е прикажен во одреден фонт. Стандардните фонтови може да се изберат само при внесување.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcharset 86 Го одредува множеството знаци на датотеката за изнесување или внесување.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2FAsciiFilterDialog 86 Го одредува множеството знаци на датотеката за изнесување или внесување.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 57 Доделува наслов на избран објект од Галеријата.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 4a Ја брише избраната графика по потврдата.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 5c Наредбата Преглед ја прикажува избраната графика.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 4c Ја вметнува избраната графика како врска.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 68 Вметнува копија од графички објект директно во документ.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 6d Одредува како избран графички објект е вметнат во документ.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 65 Ви овозможува да ја зачувате подлогата на веб-страница.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 48 Ги оневозможува вметнатите приклучоци.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 6a Поставува целата графика во документот да биде невидлива.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC cc Ако сте го исклучиле прикажувањето на графика, изберете ја наредбата Вчитај графика за да ја направите видлива.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 5c Ја копира избраната графика во таблата со исечоци.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 89 Ја копира врската над која е покажувачот на глушецот во таблата со исечоци.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 76 Отвора дијалог каде што можете да ја зачувата избраната графика.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 35 Го прикажува името на темата.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 f4 Го отвора дијалогот за визит карти каде можете да ги поставите опциите за вашите визит карти и потоа креира нов документ ($[officename] Writer).
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 4e Креира нов документ со формули ($[officename] Math).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 32 Креира нов главен документ.
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 2a Креира нов HTML-документ.
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 87 Го отвора волшебникот за бази на податоци за креирање на база на податоци.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 4c Креира нов документ за цртање ($[officename] Draw).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 2c Креира нов XForms документ.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 87 Го отвора волшебникот за бази на податоци за креирање на база на податоци.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 65 Креира нов документ за табеларни пресметки ($[officename] Calc).
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 51 Креира нов текстуален документ ($[officename] Writer).
d .uno%3ANewDoc 49 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 116 Го отвора дијалогот за налепници каде можете да ги поставите опциите за вашите налепници, и потоа креира нов текст документ за налепниците ($[officename] Writer).
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 91 Креирај нов $[officename] документ. Кликни ја стрелката за избор на типот на документ.
b slot%3A5500 99 Креира нов документ користејќи или постоечки шаблон  или отвора документ за пример.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 72 Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). If activated, the Presentation Wizard dialog appears.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 34 Креира нов  $[officename] документ.
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 4a Го отвора одбраниот шаблон за уредување.
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 7b Додава, отстранува, или преуредува шаблони или документи за пример.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 66 Ви овозможува преглед на одбраниот шаблон или документ.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 6a Ги прикажува својствата за одбраниот шаблон или документ.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 4a Го печати одбраниот шаблон или документ.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 5d Ве придвижува едно ниво погоре, ако постои папката.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW 172 Листање на расположливите шаблони или документи за одбраната категорија. Одберете шаблон или документ и потоа кликнете, Отвори. За преглед на документот кликнете го Преглед копчето над полето на десно.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 59 Ве префрла на претходниот прозорец во дијалогот.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL 163 Категориите се прикажани во полето на левата страна од дијалогот за Шаблони и документи . Кликнете на категорија за да ги прикажете датотеките кои се поврзани со таа категорија во полетоНаслов .
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2Fok 63 Креира нов документ за уредување насловен:"Налепница1"
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2FLabelDialog 92 Ви овозможува креирање на налепници. Налепниците се креираат во текст документ.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 92 Ви овозможува креирање на налепници. Налепниците се креираат во текст документ.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fbrand 73 Одберете ја марката на хартија која што сакате да ја користите.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftype 22e Одберете ја големината на форматот која што сакате да ја користите. Форматите кои што се на располагање зависат од марката која што ја одбравте од листата Марка. Ако сакате да користите сопствен формат на налепница, одберете [Корисник], и потоа кликнете на јазичето Форматирај за да го дефинирате форматот.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Finsert 48 Одберете ја базата на податоци Label text box.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ffield 48 Одберете ја базата на податоци Label text box.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftable d1 Одберете ја табелата од базата на податоци која ги содржи полињата кои сакате да ги користите во вашата налепница.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fdatabase c2 Одберете ја базата на податоци која што сакате да ја користите како извор на податоци за вашата налепница.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Faddress d1 Креира налепница со вашата повратна адреса. Текстот кој што тековно се наоѓа воТекст на налепницатасе пребришува.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftextview d7 Внесете го текстот кој што сакате да се појави на налепницата. Исто така можете да вметнете и поле од бази на податоци.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fcontinuous 49 Печати налепници на поединечни листови.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2FCardMediumPage b3 Специфицирајте ја големината на текстот на налепницата и големината на хартијат.а за налепницата
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Ftype 46 Внесете или изберете тип на налепница.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Fbrand 50 Внесете или изберете ја посакуваната марка.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fsave 6f Го зачувува тековниот формат на налепницата или визит карта.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2FSaveLabelDialog 50 Внесете или изберете ја посакуваната марка.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Frows c9 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти кои што сакате да се распоредат до целата висина на страницата.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fcols b9 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти кои сакате да се распоредат до ширината на страницата.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Ftop 150 Приказ на растојанието од горниот раб на страницата до горниот врв на првата налепница или бизнис карта. Ако користите сопствен формат, внесете сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fleft 124 Приказ на растојанието од левиот раб на страницата до левиот раб на првата налепница или визит карта.Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете ја вредноста тука.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fheight c9 Приказ на големината за налепницата или визит картата. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fwidth bc Приказ на ширината за налепницата или визит картата. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fvert 175 Приказ на растојанието помеѓу горните рабови на налепниците или на визит карти и на горниот раб на налепницата или на визит картата директно подолу. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fhori ff Приказ на растојанието помеѓу левите рабови на соседните налепници или визит карти. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност овде.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2FLabelFormatPage 57 Постави ги опциите за форматирање на хартијата.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsetup 1f Opens the Printer Setup dialog.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsynchronize af Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Frows b4 Внесете го бројот на редови со налепници или визит карти што сакате да ги имате на вашата страница.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC c8 Копирање на содржината на горната лева налепница или визит карта во преостанатите налепници или визит карти.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fcols b7 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти што сакате да ги имате во еден ред на вашата страница.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsinglelabel 65 Печати една налепница или визит карта на една страница.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fentirepage 5c Креира цела страница со налепници или визит карти.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2FLabelOptionsPage fd Поставување на дополнителни опции за вашите налепници или визит карти, вклучувајќи поставувања за текстот, синхронизацијата и печатачот.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 57 Дизајнирајте и креирајте сопствени визит-карти
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE 20b Одберетe ја големината на форматот што сакате да ја користите. Форматите кои што се на располагање зависат на вашиот избор од листата Марка. Ако сакате да користите сопствена големина за форматот, одберете [Корисник], и потоа кликнете го јазичето Форматирај за да го дефинирате форматот.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 6a Одберете ја марката на хартија што сакате да ја користите.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 55 Печатење на визит-карти на поединечни листови.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 4b Печатење визит карти на хартија во ролна.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Fautotext 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Ftreeview 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2FCardFormatPage 51 Дефинирај го приказот на вашите визит-карти.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Furl 2c Enter the address of your internet homepage.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fjob 23 Enter the title of your profession.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fcountry 30 Enter the name of the country in which you live.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname2 4b Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fmobile 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname2 4c Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fphone 21 Enter your home telephone number.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname2 4d Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Furl 36 Enter the address of your company's internet homepage.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fmobile 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 3d Enter the name of the country where your business is located.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fslogan 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fphone 25 Enter your business telephone number.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany2 21 Enter additional company details.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2FBusinessDataPage 21 Enter additional company details.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 78 Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the folder.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 43 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 3c Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 48 Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 23 Click to delete all selected files.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 15 Creates a new folder.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 18 Opens or imports a file.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 43 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL.
b .uno%3AOpen 18 Opens or imports a file.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 15 Creates a new folder.
50 fpicker%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_CONNECT_TO_SERVER 7f Opens a dialog where you can set up connection to various types of servers, including WebDAV, FTP, SSH, Windows Share and CMIS.
49 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_PLACES_LISTBOX 49 Displays "favourite" places, i.e. shortcuts to local or remote locations.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fcomments 2d Enter comments to help identify the document.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fkeywords 4b Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fsubject 61 Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Ftitle 1f Enter a title for the document.
34 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2FDescriptionInfoPage 34 Contains descriptive information about the document.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Freset a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fuserdatacb 78 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fnameed 17 Displays the file name.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2FDocumentInfoPage 32 Contains basic information about the current file.
20 sfx2%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fadd 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
27 sfx2%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fproperties 74 Enter your custom content. If you want, you can change the label for the content by clicking the Info Fields button.
2b sfx2%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2FCustomInfoPage 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Funprotect d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Frecordchanges 50 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Fprotect d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Freadonly 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2FSecurityInfoPage 2f Sets password options for the current document.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
29 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fassign 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
28 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fadmin 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
2c svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatatable 2c Select the data table for your address book.
2d svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatasource 2d Select the data source for your address book.
38 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2FAddressTemplateDialog 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 54 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 3b Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 23 Go to the last record in the table.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 1b Prints the entire document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 2c Избира облик од листата.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpaperspersheetlb 2c Избира облик од листата.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 31 Поставување на резолуција.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forientationlb 31 Поставување на резолуција.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 26 Applies the master page to all slides.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 75 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ формули од табели.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 65 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ страници.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1e vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsetup 24 Opens the printer properties dialog.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2c Избира облик од листата.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 3b Линиите се прикажани како криви.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinttofile 1b Prints the entire document.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c7 To print a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To print single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using the format 3-6;8;10;12.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 26 Sizes the preview of the master pages.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fexpander 6b Го поставува курсорот на следниот објект од избраниот тип.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 38 Prints only the pages that you specify in the Pages box.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 1b Prints the entire document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderlb 2c Избира облик од листата.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 53 Ја порамнува содржината на ќелијата на десно.
27 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsingleprintjob 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinters ab Lists the default printer for the current document. The information for the printer is displayed below this box. If you select another printer, the information is updated.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Избира облик од листата.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 31 Поставување на резолуција.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 146 За печатачите со повеќе фиоки опцијата Фиока за хартија од поставувањата на печатачот одредува дали фиоката за хартија ќе биде зададена од системските поставувања за печатачот.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 2c Избира облик од листата.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 98 Одредува дали ќе се печатат контролните полиња на формите во текстуални документи.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 67 Prints to a file instead of to a printer. Select this box, and then choose a location to save the file.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 24 Go to the first record in the table.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 74 Изберете ја оваа икона за да прелистувате низ текстуални рамки.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 1d Inserts a row into the table.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbtn 1b Prints the entire document.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 2c Избира облик од листата.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 3e Отвара дијалог за тип на графикон.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 31 Поставување на резолуција.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 53 Ја порамнува содржината на ќелијата на десно.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FPrintDialog 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcopycount 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS e6 Отвара нов прозорец во вашиот преддефиниран клиент за е-пошта со тековниот документ како прилог. Се користи форматот на Microsoft.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo e4 Отвара нов прозорец во вашиот преддефиниран клиент за е-пошта со тековниот документ како прилог. Се користи OpenDocument форматот.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
f .uno%3ASendMail e9 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General is used.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc a7 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of the 'Heading 1' paragraph style in the source document.
b .uno%3AQuit 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 27 Saves all open $[officename] documents.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fcompare 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fshow 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fopen 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fversions 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fdelete 1d Deletes the selected version.
36 sfx%2Fui%2Fversioncommentdialog%2FVersionCommentDialog 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fsave a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Falways 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2FVersionsOfDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 51 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 19 Repeats the last command.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 19 Repeats the last command.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste a6 Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN a6 Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Flist 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsource 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2FPasteSpecialDialog 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fallsheets 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcalcsearchin 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fexpander1 5f Shows more or less search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
26 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplaceall 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslikebtn 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslike a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnoformat 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
2d svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcharwidth 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fselection 20 Searches only the selected text.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearch 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fregexp 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
24 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnotes 48 In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcols 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fwholewords 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Frows 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplaceterm 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flayout cf Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchlist 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchterm 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplacelist 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fbackwards 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcase 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
30 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2FFindReplaceDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchall 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fshorterfld 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Flongerfld 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fotherfld 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilaritybtn 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2FSimilaritySearchDialog 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Frelaxbox 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilarity 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 48 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 124 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a check mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a2 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you to display.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FdescTV 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Fnameentry 1b Enter a name for the image.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FframeCB a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Ftextentry 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Furlentry 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FIMapDialog 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2FCommentDialog 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
2b svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fundo 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Frejectall 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Facceptall 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Faccept 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Freject 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2Fchanges b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2FRedlineViewPage 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcommentedit 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcomment 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Factionlist 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Faction 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdotdotdot 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frangeedit 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthorlist 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendtime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstarttime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fenddate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frange 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2FRedlineFilterPage 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthor 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdatecond 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 46 To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 46 To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 5e Enter a name for the record. The name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fbookmode 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumnssb 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumns 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fsinglepage 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fautomatic 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 82 Allows you to enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Click here, and then enter a percentage in the box.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitwandh 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 41 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Foptimal 41 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fvariable 82 Allows you to enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Click here, and then enter a percentage in the box.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitw 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility aa Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 1b Deletes the current record.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 1b Deletes the current record.
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 1b Deletes the current record.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 1b Deletes the current record.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 1b Deletes the current record.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 1b Deletes the current record.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 7f Inserts a note at the current cursor position. To view or edit the contents of a note, select the note and choose this command.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fdelete 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fsubsetlb 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
32 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2FInsertOLEObjectDialog 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
2c cui%2Fui%2Finsertplugin%2FInsertPluginDialog 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame c4 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file. Floating frames are not supported by Netscape Navigator 4.x.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb-nocjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feaststylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-nocjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-cjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-nocjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-nocjk 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-cjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-cjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2FCharNamePage 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 25 Select the color for the underlining.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Frelieflb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Feffectslb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 24 Select the color for the overlining.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Ffontcolorlb 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinelb 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcommented 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformated 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fthousands 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fnegnumred 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdecimalsed 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fsourceformat 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdelete 23 Deletes the selected number format.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Flanguagelb 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcurrencylb 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fedit 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fadd 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatlb 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fleadzerosed 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcategorylb 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
34 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2FNumberingFormatPage 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Funvisitedlb c1 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fvisitedlb bf Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftargetfrmlb 71 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fnameed 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Feventpb 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furlpb 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furled 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftexted 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2FCharURLPage 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninged 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fraiselowersb 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninglb b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsuperscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fstartbracket 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fendbracket 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 7f Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckApplySpacing 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckHangPunct 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckForbidList ef Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FAsianTypography ea Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcomboLB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTPERCENT 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 94 Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_AUTO 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_FLINEINDENT 110 Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, click the Position tab, and then enter an amount in the Minimum space numbering <=> text box.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FParaIndentSpacing 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
3c cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonST_RIGHTTAB_ASIAN 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonST_LEFTTAB_ASIAN 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DELALL 81 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervalls as the default tab stops.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FParagraphTabsPage 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadowcolorlb 1e Select a color for the shadow.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fdistancemf 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadows 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fsync 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fbottommf 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Ftopmf 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Frightmf 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fleftmf 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinecolorlb 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinestylelb 6c Click the border style that you want to apply. The border is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fpresets 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2FBorderPage 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Farearb 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftilerb 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fpositionrb 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fwindowpos 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbrowse 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftablelb 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fparalb 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftransparencymf 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbackgroundcolorset 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fshowpreview 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Flink 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fselectlb 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2FBackgroundPage 24 Set the background color or graphic.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ftextdirection 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
2c cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_LASTLINE 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcheckCB_EXPAND 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Ftextdirectionlb 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
2e cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_TEXTDIRECTION 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
29 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FParaAlignPage 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fcategory 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Flinkedwith 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fautoupdate b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fdesc 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnamero a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnamerw a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnextstyle 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2FManageStylePage 27 Set the options for the selected style.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckAdaptBox 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageLayout 80 Specify whether to apply the formatting to odd pages, even pages, or to both odd and even pages that use the current page style.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonVert 31 Centers the cells vertically on the printed page.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckRegisterTrue 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboRegisterStyle dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargRight e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargLeft e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargTop 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPaperTray ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboTextFlowBox 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargBot 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonHorz 33 Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonLandscape 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonPortrait 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinHeight 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinWidth 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboLayoutFormat 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageFormat 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FPageFormatPage 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckAutofit 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinHeight 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonEdit 18 Add or edit header text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargRight 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonMore 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargLeft 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinSpacing 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameFP 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameLR 65 Adds the header to both even and odd pages. This option is only available for the Default page style.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckFooterOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckHeaderOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2f svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckDynSpacing 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FHFFormatPage 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
35 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 7a Adds the footer to both even and odd pages. This option is only available if the current page uses the Default page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 3a Changes the selected western characters to capital letters
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 3d Changes the selected western characters to lowercase letters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 82 Changes the case of the selected characters, or if the cursor is in a word, changes the case of all of the characters in the word.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstyles 60 Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstylelb 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fpositionlb 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight2ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight1ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight4ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft3ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft1ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
3e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FAsianPhoneticGuideDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fadjustlb 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight3ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft4ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft2ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 91 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight 91 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ad Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ad Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b3 Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b3 Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2FSplitCellsDialog 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 27 Defines the class of the selected term.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2Fstylename 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2FCreateStyleDialog 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstringinput%2Fedit 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fobjectnamedialog%2FObjectNameDialog 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fdesc_entry e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fobject_title_entry 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2FObjectTitleDescDialog 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_CAP_STYLE 52 Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_EDGE_STYLE 91 Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
2c cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 1e Select the width for the line.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 1e Select the width for the line.
21 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
2a cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLineTabPage 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fnamedialog%2FNameDialog 24 Enter a name for the new line style.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLineEndPage 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FCB_HATCHBCKGRD 6d Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FRBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_SCALE fd Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FNUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4a Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FRBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_STEPCOUNT 5d Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 57 Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_ORIGINAL 8d Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_AREA_TYPE 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_STRETCH 5a Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FAreaTabPage 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fmodify 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fadd 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortolb 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfrommtr 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fload 23 Load a different list of gradients.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfromlb 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
18 cui%2Fgrdientpage%2Fsave 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fbordermtr 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fanglemtr 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradientslb 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterymtr c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortomtr 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterxmtr cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradienttypelb 5c Lists the available gradients. Click the gradient that you want to apply, and then click OK.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2FGradientPage 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fsave 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fload 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fmodify 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fhatchingslb 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinecolorlb 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fadd 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinetypelb 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglectl 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglemtr 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdistancemtr 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2FHatchPage 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FLB_BITMAPS 5b Select a bitmap in the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FLB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 32 Select a background color for your bitmap pattern.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FLB_COLOR 54 Select a foreground color, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBitmapTabPage 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
35 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
31 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
37 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FLB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
34 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FTransparencyTabPage 50 Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_CONTOUR 52 Adapts the text flow so that it match the contours of the selected drawing object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FULL_WIDTH 41 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTextAttributesPage 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FLB_ORIENT 0 
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_SIZERECT 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FLB_ANCHOR 0 
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_POSRECT f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FPositionAndSize 25 Resizes or moves the selected object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_ANGLE 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_RECT 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FRotation 1c Rotates the selected object.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FSlantAndCornerRadius 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 66 Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FNUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
2d cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FLB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTextAnimation 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD 3f Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 3f Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckHyphActive 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckVertStack 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckWrapTextAuto 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Freferences 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinDegrees a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckAsianMode 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Fdialcontrol 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxVertAlign 51 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinIndentFrom 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxHorzAlign 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FCellsAlignPage 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 4a Enter the number of degrees to include in the selected 3D rotation object.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 10c Adjusts the shape and of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1e Converts the texture to color.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 120 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 7e Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 69 Click to undo the last step of your spellcheck session. Click again to undo the previous step, and so on.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 80 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 41 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors.
f .uno%3ASpelling 41 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
3c svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2FChineseConversionDialog 8d Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8d Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Freplaceed 85 Displays a suggested replacement for the current word. You can also type a new word in this box, or click a word in the Synonym list.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Falternatives 6c Select the meaning that matches the context of the current word, and then select a word in the Synonym list.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fwordcb 46 Displays the current selection, or the word that contains that cursor.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2FThesaurusDialog 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 ab Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the eyedropper, and then click a color in the selected image.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a1 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the eyedropper tool is selected.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8d Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5b Opens the eyedropper dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2FApplyAutoFmtPage 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2Fedit 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
33 cui%2Fui%2Facoroptionspage%2FAutocorrectOptionsPage 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Freplace 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
20 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnew 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftextonly 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnewtext f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Forigtext 257 Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type. Wildcard character * in the end of word results the replacement of the word before arbitrary suffixes, too. Wildcard character * before the word results the replacement after arbitrary prefixes, too. For example, the pattern "i18n*" with the replacement text "internationalization" will find and replace "i18ns" with "internationalizations", or the pattern "*..." with the replacement text "…" will find and replace three dots in "word..." with the typographically correct precomposed Unicode horizontal ellipsis ("word…").
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftabview 12f Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
2c cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2FAcorReplacePage 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautoabbrev 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewdouble 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewabbrev 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdoublelist b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdouble ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrevlist 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrev d3 Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Flang 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautodouble 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
2a cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2FAcorExceptPage 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultsingle 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fenddouble 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fendsingle 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartsingle 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartdouble 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoublereplace 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fsinglereplace 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fchecklist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
2c cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoubledouble 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Flist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
32 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2FApplyLocalizedPage 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR 97 To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT 97 To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 83 Click the word to replace the highlighted word for the current session only. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST a1 Makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ea Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, select "When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2Fvalueset 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2FPickBulletPage 38 Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2Fvalueset 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2FPickNumberingPage 3b Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2Fvalueset 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2FPickOutlinePage 8e Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Flinkgraphics 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Fvalueset 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2FPickGraphicPage 4f Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Forientlb 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fwidthmf 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Frelsize 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbullet 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fcolor 2f Select a color for the current numbering style.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fstartat 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fheightmf 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsublevels 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fprefix 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fkeepratio 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fnumfmtlb 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Flevellb 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbitmap 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fcharstyle 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsuffix a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2FNumberingOptionsPage 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumberingwidthmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentatmf 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnum2alignlb cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumalignlb cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Falignedatmf 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumfollowedbylb 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2FNumberingPositionPage 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentatmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2FOutlinePositionPage 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fatmf 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 66 Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 51 Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 2f Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 48 Ги листа постоечките макроа и дијалози.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 74 Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
31 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fedit 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Frun 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacros 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fassign 7f Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a shortcut key combination, or an event.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 16 Creates a new library.
3d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2FBasicMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Flibraries a5 Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FconfirmpassEntry 32 Reenter the new password for the selected library.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FnewpassEntry 2e Enter a new password for the selected library.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FoldpassEntry 34 Enter the current password for the selected library.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FPasswordDialog 2e Protects the selected library with a password.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 43 Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 68 Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcommands ad Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS ad Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcategories ad Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 6c Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT 24 Adds new icons to the list of icons.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fdelete 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fedit 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fxsltfilterdialog%2FXSLTFilterDialog 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnew 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fsave 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2FXMLFilterSettingsDialog 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
33 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fdescription 32 Внесете коментар (по избор).
35 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Finterfacename 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
33 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fapplication 78 Изберете ја апликацијата која сакате да ја користите со филтерот.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Ffiltername 5a Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fextension 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
3f filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2FXmlFilterTabPageGeneral 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltimport 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltexport 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowsetemp 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Ftempimport 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowseimport 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowseexport 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fdoc 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
4d filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2FXmlFilterTabPageTransformation 31 Enter or edit file information for an XML filter.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 51 Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
e .uno%3AGallery 59 Opens the Gallery, where you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 29 Specifies the display options for guides.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchangepath 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautodownload 90 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 44 Продолжува со паузираното симнување.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 3e Ги инсталира симнатите ажурирања.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 75 Го прекинува симнувањето и ги брише делумно симнатите датотеки.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 94 Изберете ја екстензијата која сакате да ја отстраните и потоа кликнете Отстрани.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fextensions cb Select the directory where you want to add a new extension, or select the extensions that you want to remove, enable, disable, or export. To select multiple extensions, press the Ctrl key when you click.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2FExtensionManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 2c Избира облик од листата.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 2c Избира облик од листата.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 2c Избира облик од листата.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass2ed 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 2c Избира облик од листата.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass1ed 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 2c Избира облик од листата.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FPasswordDialog 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablea11y 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablecopy 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeany 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangecomment 68 Дозволени се само пополнување на полињата во формуларот.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintlow 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fsetpassword 74 Кликнете за да отворите дијалог каде можете да внесете лозинка.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopenpdf c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintnone 4a Печатењето на документот не е дозволено.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fdefault 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2FPdfLinksPage 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fallbookmarks 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Feffects 4c Selects to export Impress slide transition effect to respective PDF effects.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fdisplay 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fopen 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fcenter 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fresize 4b Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fconvert d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2FPdfSecurityPage 74 Кликнете за да отворите дијалог каде можете да внесете лозинка.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontlayout 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Ftoolbar 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fsinglelayout 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblelevel 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpageonly a1 Изберете за да создадете PDF датотека која ќе ја прикажува само содржината на страницата.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2FPdfUserInterfacePage 4b Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontfacinglayout 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2FPdfViewPage a1 Изберете за да создадете PDF датотека која ќе ја прикажува само содржината на страницата.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpage 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffirstonleft f9 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fallowdups 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeform 68 Дозволени се само пополнување на полињата во формуларот.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Foutline 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Ftagged 6d Selects to export special tags into the corresponding PDF tags. This can increase file sizes by huge amounts.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fforms 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexport 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpdfa ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fdefaultlayout 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Femptypages 190 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Freduceresolution 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fformat 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fquality 4d Внесете ниво на квалитет за JPEG компресија.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fembed 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitvis 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fselection 3c Ја изнесува тековната селекција.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwidth 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpages 5c Ја изнесува страницата која ја пишувате во полето.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fwindow 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fjpegcompress 61 Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fresolution 4e Изберете ја целната резолуција за сликите.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Frange 5c Ја изнесува страницата која ја пишувате во полето.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeinsdel 74 Дозволени се само вметнување, бришење и ротирање на страниците.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fcomments 42 Selects to export notes of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopeninternet 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwin 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fmenubar 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fall 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Flosslesscompress 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprinthigh 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitdefault b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexporturl 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangenone 46 Не се дозволени промени на содржината.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fthumbs 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fbookmarks f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2FPdfGeneralPage 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
34 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblebookmark 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 39 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF).
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF 7b Exports the entire file to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then sends the result as an attachment to an e-mail message.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 62 Enable or disable the macros. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 62 Enable or disable the macros. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security to set the options.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME 1b Prints the entire document.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f3 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault e2 Кликнете на иконата Печати датотека директноза да го печатите активниот документ со стандардните поставувања за печатење.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 37a Црта линија која завршува со правоаголно балонче со вертикална насока на текстот од каде влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете ја страна на балончето за да ја промените неговата големина. За да додадете текст, кликнете на работ од балончето и потоа напишете го или вметнете го Вашиот текстот. За да го измените правоаголното балонче во заоблено, влечете го најголемата аголна страна кога покажувачот ќе се смени во рака. Ова е достапно само кога е овозможена поддршка за азијски јазици.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 304 Црта линија која завршува со правоаголно балонче со хоризонтална насока на текстот од каде влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете ја страна на балончето за да ја помените неговата големина. За да додадете текст, кликнете на работ од балончето и потоа напишете го или вметнете го Вашиот текстот. За да го измените правоаголното балонче во заоблено, влечете го најголемата аголна страна кога покажувачот ќе се смени во рака.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 2cb Црта текстуално поле со ветикална насока на текстот каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде било во документот и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Исто така можете да го поместите покажувачот каде што сакате да го додадете текстот, влечете го полето за текст и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Ова е достапно само кога е овозможена поддршка за азијски јазици.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee 1af Вметнува анимиран текст со хоризонтална насока на текстот во тековниот документ.  Влечете го полето за текст, потоа напишете го или вметнете го вашиот текст. За да доделите ефект за анимација, изберете Формат - Текст - Анимација на текст.
f .uno%3ADrawText 20e Црта текстуално поле со хоризонтална насока на текстот каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете го полето за тект за да ја постигнете саканата големина каде било во документот и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Ротирајте го текстуалното поле за да добиете ротиран текст.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 327 Црта исполнета форма, дефинирана од кружен лак и неговиот дијаметар во тековниот документ. За да нацртате дел од круг, влечете го кругот додека ја постигнете саканата големина, а потоа кликнете за да го дефинирате почетна точка на дијаметарот. Поместете го покажувачот каде што сакате да ја ставите крајната точка од дијаметарот и кликнете. Не мора да кликате на елипсата. За да нацртате дел од елипса задржете го притиснат Shift додека влечете.
a .uno%3APie 30a Црта исполнета форма, дефинирана од елипсовиден лак и двата негови радиуси во тековниот документ. За да нацртате елипсовидна пита, влечете елипса додека ја постигнете саканата големина, а потоа кликнете за да го дефинирате неговиот прв радиус. Поместете го покажувачот каде што сакате да го ставите вториот радиус и кликнете. Не мора да кликате на елипсата. За да нацртате кружна пита задржете го притиснат Shift додека влечете.
a .uno%3AArc 2a4 Црта лак во тековниот документ. За да нацртате лак, влечете елипса додека да ја постигнете саканата големина, и потоа кликнете за да ја дефинирате почетната точка на лакот. Позиционирајте го покажувачот каде што сакате да ја поставите крајната точка и кликнете. Не мора да кликнете на елипсата. За да нацртате кружен лак задржете го притиснат тастерот Shift додека влечете.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled 194 Црта произволна линија каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За да ја завршите линијата, отпуштете го копчето на глувчето. За да нацртате затворена форма, отпуштете го копчето на глувчето до почетната точка на линијата.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 2b1 Црта мазна Bezier крива. Кликнете каде што сакате да започнува кривата, влечете, отпуштете, и потоа движете го покажувачот каде што сакате да завршува кривата и кликнете. Движете го покажувачот и повторно кликнете за да и додадете на кривата права линија. Кликнете два пати за да завршите со цртањето. За да креирате затворена форма, кликнете два пати на почетната точка на кривата.
b .uno%3ARect 1c9 Црта правоаголни каде што повлекувате во тековниот документ. За да нацртате квадрат, држете го притиснат тастерот Shift додека влечете. Кликнете каде што сакате да го поставите аголот на правоаголникот и влечете додека да ја добиете саканата големина.
b .uno%3ALine 103 Црта права линија каде што ќе повлечете во тековниот документ. За да ја задржите линијата на 45 степени, задржете го копчето Shift додека влечете.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 22a Црта линија составена од серии од прави линии. Влечете за да нацртате линија, кликнете за да ја дефинирате крајната точка на линијата и потоа влечете за да нацртате нова линија. Кликнете два пати за да завршите со цртањето. За да креирате затворена форма, кликнете два пати на почетната точка од линијата.
e .uno%3AEllipse 178 Црта елипса каде што влечете во тековниот документ.Кликнете каде што сакате да нацртате елипса и влечете додека да ја добиете саканата големина. За да нацртате круг, задржете го тастерот Shift додека влечете.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw f9 Кликнете за да ја отворите или затворите лентата Цртање , каде што можете да додадете  форми, линии, текст и повици во тековниот документ.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 3f Го отвара алатникот Дизај на форма
c .uno%3ALabel 38 Креира поле за приказ на текст.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 43 Го отвара алатникот Повеќе контроли.
f .uno%3AComboBox 2f Креира комбинирана листа.
f .uno%3ACombobox 2f Креира комбинирана листа.
e .uno%3AListBox 26 Креира поле за листа.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 26 Креира поле за избор.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 18 Креира копче.
b .uno%3AEdit 26 Креира поле за текст.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 2d Креира форматирано поле.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 30 Креира поле за означување.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 26 Креира поле за избор.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 30 Креира поле за означување.
d .uno%3AConfig c7 Иконата Контроли на форма отвора алатникот со алатките кои Ви се потребни за да креирате интерактивна форма.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 60 Избраната контрола се претвора во контрола за слика.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 5f Избраната контрола се претвора во форматирано поле.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за датум.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 60 Избраната контрола се претвора во избор за датотеки.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 5a Избраната контрола се претвора во копче со слика.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 56 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за шема.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 61 Избраната контрола се претвора во комбинирана листа.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 5a Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за валута.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 62 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за означување.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 5c Избраната контрола се претвора во копче за опција.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за време.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за листа.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 5b Избраната контрола се претвора во нумеричко поле.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 4c Избраната контрола се претвора во ознака.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за текст.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType e6 Повикува подмени каде што може да изберете тип на контрола со која ќе ја замените тековно избраната компонента во документот.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 4a Избраната контрола се претвора во копче.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 6a Кликнете Сите Ако сакате да Ви бидат покажани сите колони.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 123 Во дијалогот Покажи колони  можете да ги изберете колоните кои сакате да бидат покажани. Држете го притиснат тастерот Shift или Ctrl за да изберете повеќе елементи.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 44 Го повикува дијалогот Покажи  колони.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 9a Повикува подмени каде што можете да ги изберете колоните кои ќе се покажат повторно.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 2e Ја крие избраната колона.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 41 Ја бриште тековно избраната колона.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL c2 Отвора подмени за избор на податочно поле за замена на избраното податочното полево контролата за табела.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL b0 Повикува подмену за да го изберете податочното поле за да го придружите на контролата за табела.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 4d Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin box.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 5e For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 55 The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 16 Sets the default time.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 16 Sets the default date.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 5e Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button type.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 54 The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 5e Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider at the scrollbar.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 53 Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 65 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 54 Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 54 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 122 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 1e Determines spin box intervals.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 6f The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5b If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 75 Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 87 On the Properties tab page, specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, specifies the name for the form.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 77 Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5b Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 73 The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6e The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2f Sets the background color of the control field.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 37 Determine here the desired format for the date readout.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 73 Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 50 Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 55 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin box control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 7d Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 6c Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 83 Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 75 The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2d Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 51 The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3d Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 69 If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL f9 While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL 34 Defines how an empty string input should be handled.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 85 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in Spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 76 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed at the same time.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5c The Key release event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 59 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4c The When losing focus event takes place if a control field looses the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 54 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3b The When initiating event occurs when an action is started.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 61 In this dialog you can specify, among others,  the data source and the events for the whole form.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 40 Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 51 The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 4a The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 72 The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6b If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 80 If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fd Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
2f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FCTRLtree 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 79 In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
f .uno%3AAddField 48 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 34 Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN bc Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not visible on screen and is hidden from the user. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 84 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 76 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 8a Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 0 
10 .uno%3ABackColor 14d Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight color, click the arrow next to the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ab Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 71 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 5b Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 99 Отвора алатник кој содржи функции за оптимизирање на редовите и колоните во табела.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 65 Loads a document specified by a URL. You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
a SID_RELOAD 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 4a Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 2b Opens the hyperlink at the cursor position.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 21 Closes the dialog without saving.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 39 Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 3e Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 64 Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 3d Opens a web browser, into which you can load the desired URL.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 3f Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 67 Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 28 Assigns a news address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
d .uno%3APageUp 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
f .uno%3APageDown 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 72 Ја отвара избраната датотека од база на податоци за уредување.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c6 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name.. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 5b Closes the connection to the data source. See Tools - Options - Data sources - Connections.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4e Filters the records based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fautoformat 79 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableformat 7e Opens the Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableheading 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fuserdefined 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fcolumnname 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallleft 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ffromdatabase 1d Accepts the database formats.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallright 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneleft 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftablecols 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneright 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftabledbcols 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Frowonly 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastable 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastext 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2FStandardFilterDialog 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 5d Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1d Starts or cancels the search.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 77 Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 28 Searches through a specified data field.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 28 Searches through a specified data field.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 1c Searches through all fields.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 53 Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 1d Closes the Add Tables dialog.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 13 Shows only queries.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 12 Shows only tables.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
f .uno%3AAddTable 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 28 Displays the image as a charcoal sketch.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia 2e Opens a dialog for setting the aging function.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize 29 Opens a dialog for defining solarization.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 24 Removes single pixels from an image.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 45 Specifies whether the pixels to be solarized are also to be inverted.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 23 Increases the contrast in an image.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 5a Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. The higher the value, the more the image ages.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 21 Softens the contrast in an image.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 59 Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 43 Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 5e Opens the Graphic Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected graphic image.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 51 Specifies the amount of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 53 Specifies the amount of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4b Specifies the amount of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 26 Opens a dialog to crop pixel graphics.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4b With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 53 Opens the Flowcharts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 64 The icon opens the Fontwork Gallery from which you can insert graphical text art into your document.
e .uno%3ADBLimit 4b Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 74 Copies the formatting of the selected text or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fnondistinct 21 Not use distinct values in query.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fdistinct 1d Use distinct values in query.
3d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2FQueryPropertiesDialog 1d Use distinct values in query.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 4e Opens the Stars toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX a6 Полето за листа на самиот врв е каде што можете да изберете други модули на помош за %PRODUCTNAME.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND a0 Ја пребарува целата Помошна страница, почнувајќи од тековната позиција на покажувачот.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 50 Разликува меѓу текст со големи и мали букви.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH aa Внесете го текстот за кој што сакате да пребарате или изберете елемент од текстот во листата.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 32 Наоѓа само целосни зборови.
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 4f Го отвора дијалогот Најди на оваа страница.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 63 Пребарува назад од тековната позиција на покажувачот.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 35 Ја печати тековната страница
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 55 Го наоѓа следното појавување на бараниот поим.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 71 Се преместува на првата страница од тековниот наслов на Помош
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 3a Оди напред на следната страница
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL cd Навигацискиот панел на прозорецот од помошта содржи страници со јазичиња Содржина, Индекс, Најди и Обележувачи.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 47 Се враќа назад на претходната страница
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 54 Ја додава оваа страница во вашите обележувачи
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 4d Го сокрива и покажува навигацискиот панел
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 7d Алатникот содржи важни функции за контролирање на Системот за помош
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 56 Обезбедува краток преглед на Системот за помош
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 4f Кликнете за да ја прикажете избраната тема.
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 95 Двоен клик на елемент или напишете го зборот што сакате да го најдете во индексот.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 4c Го прикажува елементот избран во листата.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 99 Одредува дали само да пребарува во заглавјата на документ за поимот за пребарување.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS d3 Одредува дали да се изврши точно пребарување за зборот што го внесовте. Непотполните зборови нема да бидат најдени.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 109 Ги прикажува заглавјата на страниците најдени во вашето пребарување со целосен текст. За да прикажете страница, двоен клик на нејзиниот елемент.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 93 Кликнете за да започне пребарувањето со целосен текст за поимот што го внесовте.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 9b Внесете го поимот за пребарување овде. Пребарувањето не разликува мали/големи букви.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 63 отвора дијалог за внесување друго име за обележувачот
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 3f го избришува избраниот обележувач
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 48 ја прикажува избраната тема од помошта.
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS f9 Двојно кликање на обележувач и притискање на копчето Enter ја отвора доделената страница во помош. Десен клик го отвора контекстното мени.
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE b4 Го прикажува името на обележаната страница. Исто така можете да напишете ново име за обележувачот.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS b5 Ги прикажува главните теми од помошта, подредени на сличен начин како папки во менаџер на датотеки.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 58 Го отвора прозорецот Површина на извлекувањето.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 5e Го отвора прозорецот Осветлување на извлекувањето.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 4e Го отвора алатникот Боја на извлекувањето.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 50 Го отвора прозорецот Насока на извлекување.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 1e Изберете насока.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 3e Внесете длабочина на извлекување.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 56 Го отвора прозорецот Длабочина на извлекување.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 60 Го накривува избраниот објект налево за пет степени.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 62 Го накривува избраниот објект надесно за пет степени.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 60 Го накривува избраниот објект нагоре за пет степени.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 60 Го накривува избраниот објект надолу за пет степени.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 68 Ги вклучува и исклучува 3Д-ефектите за избраните објекти.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 63 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 68 According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 34 Specifies that you want to create a personal letter.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 3b Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 93 Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 3d Specifies that you want to create a business letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 45 Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 81 Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER 8a Specifies that your own address is imprinted in small size above the sender address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6e Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6f Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 66 Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 57 Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 29 Includes a footer on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Includes fold marks on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 2f Includes a subject line on the letter template.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4c Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Includes a small size return address on the letter template.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Includes a logo on the letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 38 Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 3e Address database fields are inserted into the letter template.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 48 Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Specifies the street address of the sender.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 21 Specifies the name of the sender.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 33 Use the address data from the following text boxes.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 45 Use the address data from Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User data.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Specifies the sender and recipient information.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2e Includes page numbers in your letter template.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 30 Select to suppress the footer on the first page.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 24 Enter the text for the footer lines.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 39 Specifies the information to include in the footer space.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 31 Saves the template and keeps it open for editing.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5c Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2d Specifies the title of the document template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 50 Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b0 According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 8a The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK c8 Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 29 Creates a fax template for a private fax.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 30 Creates a fax template for a business-style fax.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 27 Defines the style of your fax document.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 12 Includes a footer.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 18 Includes a subject line.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 16 Includes a date field.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 18 Includes a company logo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 29 Specifies the fax elements to be printed.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 45 Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 1e Enter the sender address data.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1e Enter the sender address data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 1e Enter the sender address data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 1e Enter the sender address data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1e Enter the sender address data.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 1e Enter the sender address data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 76 Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 3a Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 1a Specifies the footer data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 27 Defines the template name and location.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4d Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 29 Select the page design from the list box.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 27 Specifies a page design for the agenda.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 26 Specifies the location of the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 23 Specifies the title of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 22 Specifies the time of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 22 Specifies the date of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3d Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 28 Specifies whether to print a Notes line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 2f Specifies whether to print a Please bring line.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 2e Specifies whether to print a Please read line.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 34 Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 3e Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 4b Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the resource persons.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 45 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the timekeeper.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 46 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facilitator.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 45 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the note taker.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 58 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 30 Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 1f Moves the current topic row up.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1e Removes the current topic row.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Moves the current topic row down.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 34 Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3a Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 53 Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5f Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 2a Specifies the name of the agenda template.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 36 Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 34 Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 44 Returns to the previous step without deleting your current settings.
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
c slot%3A10425 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 36 Specifies that templates appear in the preview window.
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 100 Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 2a Click Open to see a file selection dialog.
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 3d Opens a list box containing various modifiable presentations.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 34 Displays a list of previously created presentations.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 23 Creates a new (empty) presentation.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 44 Specifies the presentation type and allows you to select a template.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 2c Creates a presentation to be used as slides.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 2c Creates a computer screen presentation only.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 3d Creates a presentation to be used as overhead transparencies.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 2e Uses the original page format of the template.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 34 Creates a presentation that can be printed on paper.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 5f Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 2c Defines the pause between each presentation.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 2f Defines the duration of each presentation page.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 60 The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1c Determines the effect speed.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 2a Specifies an effect for your presentation.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 46 Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 66 Use this field for further thoughts and ideas that you would like to cover later in your presentation.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 29 Specifies the topic of your presentation.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 39 Click to create the form without answering further pages.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 28 Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 2d Displays the fields that are in the new form.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 42 Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 3d Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 32 Select the relation on which the subform is based.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 35 Click to add a subform based on an existing relation.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 18 Select to add a subform.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 3d Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 44 Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 1d The labels are right-aligned.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 1c The labels are left-aligned.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 23 Select to disallow adding new data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 21 Select to disallow deleting data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 20 Select to disallow editing data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 4f Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 37 Creates a form that is only used for entering new data.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2b Specifies that the field borders look flat.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 30 Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 29 Specifies that the fields have no border.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 26 Specifies the page style for the form.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 3f Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 4a Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 1f Specifies the name of the form.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 2a Activates the wizard for creating reports.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 2e Click to transfer all fields to the right box.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 39 Click to transfer the selected field(s) to the right box.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 40 Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 54 Click to move a field from the right box to the left box, or double-click the field.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 54 Click to move a field from the left box to the right box, or double-click the field.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST b4 Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING c6 Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 33 Select the first field by which to sort the report.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 33 Selects a portrait page orientation for the report.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 34 Selects a landscape page orientation for the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 8a Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 65 Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 30 When you click Finish, the report will be saved.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 6f Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 44 When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 89 Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 43 Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 31 Deletes the selected design from the design list.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 1e Displays all existing designs.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 81 Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 66 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 48 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 3d Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP 99 When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 8b The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT d4 The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 87 Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 32 Defines the amount of time for each slide display.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 27 Creates a title page for your document.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES b2 Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 6f Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 2d Specifies that your notes are also displayed.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 55 Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 60 Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 3a Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 5f Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 3d Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation.
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY 35 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 25 The files are exported as JPEG files.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 23 The files are exported as GIF files
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 36 Specifies additional text to appear on the title page.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 49 Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 1d Specifies the e-mail address.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 56 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 58 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 57 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 55 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 50 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 43 Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 34 Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 43 Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 43 Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 56 Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 5a Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 55 Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 32 Specifies the currency to be converted into euros.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 16 Starts the conversion.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 4f Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT bc Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4b Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 4b Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1a Closes the Euro Converter.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6b Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 57 Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 22 Activates the help for the dialog.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 3b Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 44 Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 60 Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename].
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 32 Exits the wizard without implementing any changes.
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 4d Select this option if you already use an address book in Mozilla or Netscape.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 46 Select this option if you already have address data on an LDAP server.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
c slot%3A10934 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 3a Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 59 Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates.
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 1f Specifies the data source name.
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS db Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 34 Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 1e Deletes the selected settings.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7c Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "none".
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 2e Enter a description for the selected document.
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 88 Enter the title for the selected document. The title appears as a hyperlink to the selected document on the index page of your web site.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 44 Select the file format that you want to export the selected file to.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 28 Removes the selected file from the list.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 37 Enter the name of the author for the selected document.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC db Opens a dialog where you can select the files that you want to have to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS f9 Lists the documents that you want to publish to your web site. The wizard can convert %PRODUCTNAME documents to HTML, PDF, or, in some cases, Flash format before the documents are uploaded. All other files are uploaded in their original file format.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 3e Optimizes the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 3d Optimizes the web site for a 800x600 pixel screen resolution.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 3d Optimizes the web site for a 640x480 pixel screen resolution.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 36 Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 3c Displays the number of pages in your site on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 30 Displays the file format icon on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 33 Displays the format of the files on the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 49 Includes the date of the last time a file was modified on the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 3f Includes the creation dates of the documents on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 4d Includes the names of the people who created the documents on the index page.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 44 Includes the summary information of the documents on the index page.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 3b Includes the file names of the documents on the index page.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 54 Select the Icons that you want to use for the navigation elements on the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 2d Select a Background image for the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 2b Select the color scheme for the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 30 Clears the background image from the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 4e Opens a file open dialog to select a background image file for the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 36 Specifies a background image for the Web Wizard style.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 28 Clears the icon set from the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 54 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentations documents in the Web Wizard.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 58 Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 57 Enter the e-mail address for the index page. The address is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 53 Enter the modified date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 53 Enter the creation date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 56 Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 5f Enter the title for the index page. This element is displayed on the title bar of web browsers.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 25 Enter the name for the settings file.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 67 Opens the FTP Connection dialog where you can edit and test the connection settings for the FTP server.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 46 Opens a dialog where you can specify the location of the archive file.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 35 Saves the settings that you specified in this wizard.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 22 Opens a dialog to select a folder.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 48 Opens your web page in the default web browser of your operating system.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 57 Enter the location of a directory on the FTP server where you want to store your files.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 33 Tests the FTP connection with the current settings.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3d Enter the password that is required to access the FTP server.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 3e Enter the user name that is required to access the FTP server.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 51 Opens a dialog where you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2f Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 44 Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 66 If you click the cell, you can select among the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 4b The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 2b Select a function to run in the query here.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 8d Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels.
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 2a Enter the name of the query or table view.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 5a If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 49 Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 51 Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 26 Select conditions to define the query.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 16 Edit Joint Properties.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 7c Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 50 Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 2d Specifies the link type of the selected link.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 1d Enter the new password again.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 17 Enter the new password.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 17 Enter the old password.
1c sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fusered 23 Specifies the name of the new user.
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 2a This button opens the Field Format dialog.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 4f If this command has a check mark, the data field in this line is a primary key.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 96 Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 14 Displays help texts.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 22 Specifies an optional description.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 19 Specifies the field type.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Specifies the value that is the default in new data records.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 84 Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 32 This area is where you define the table structure.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 54 Displays the a list fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 50 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Deletes the current index.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 14 Creates a new index.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST 46 Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Renames the current index.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 57 Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 28 Defines the key fields for the relation.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 46 Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 40 Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW b4 If the database supports Views, you can select this option only when a query is copied in a table container. This option enables you to see and edit a query as a normal table view.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 40 Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 29 Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 1e Specifies a name for the copy.
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3e Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES b8 Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 23 Enables automatic type recognition.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 40 Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 2c Select the default value for a Yes/No field.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 7a Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 14 Select a field type.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 43 Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 2b Selects all of the data fields in the list.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN a0 Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 2a Clears all of the check boxes in the list.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 168 Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, select the check box in front of the data field name. To map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b2 Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBase driver, leave this check box clear.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 89 Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 63 Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 67 Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 56 Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 61 Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBase database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 7f Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 3a Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 38 Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 33 Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 3b Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 38 Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 3a Lists the current indexes for the selected database table.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 31 Select the database table that you want to index.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fexecute 40 Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fstatus 48 Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsqlhistory 6a Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsql 3a Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2FDirectSQLDialog 4f Opens a dialog where you can enter an SQL command for administering a database.
d .uno%3ASortup 5b Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 4c Displays and lets you edit the database access rights for the selected user.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 1a Removes the selected user.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 3d Changes the current user password for accessing the database.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 34 Adds a new user for accessing the selected database.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 32 Select the user whose settings you want to modify.
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 42 Displays the amount of used space in the database as a percentage.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 53 Displays the amount of free space (in megabytes) that is available in the database.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 38 Displays the path and the name of the DATADEVSPACE file.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 3a Displays the path and the name of the TRANSACTIONLOG file.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 36 Displays the full size (in megabytes) of the database.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 37 Displays the path and the name of the SYSDEVSPACE file.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 2e Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 34 Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 4d Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD 11 Enter a password.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 25 Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 27 Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a1 Enter the name of the domain user that is used by Adabas internally. Normally, the default settings for the name and password of the domain user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR cb Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. Normally, the default settings for the name and the password of the control user are not changed.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD 11 Enter a password.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 2d Enter the name of the database administrator.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 2c Enter the path for the transaction log file.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 11 Enter a password.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1e Type the name of the database.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBase driver.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 38 Select the type of database that you want to connect to.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 38 Enter the path to the text files that the database uses.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 3b Enter the password that is required to access the database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT a6 Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC 62 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 20 Select to create a new database.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 96 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 28 Specifies the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 2b A password must contain 3 to 18 characters.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 30 A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 2a Click to open a database selection dialog.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 1d Open a path selection dialog.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 28 Enter the path to the dBase *.dbf files.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 33 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog:
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 24 Enter the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 2e Enter the port number for the database server.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 26 Enter the URL for the database server.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 26 Enter the name of the Oracle database.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 87 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 81 Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 1a Click to access csv files.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 1a Click to access txt files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 25 Opens the Advanced Properties dialog.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 5e Opens the Database Properties dialog where you can specify settings for the selected database.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 6a Opens the Connection Type Wizard which helps you to open a database file that is in an unsupported format.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail fe Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 2e Click to save the form into the database file.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 27 Enter the file name for the saved form.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 44 Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, view, or query.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 1c Opens the table design view.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 38 Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 4b Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
d .uno%3ADBSort 10 Opens a submenu.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 10 Opens a submenu.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 99 Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 31 Enter the password to connect to the data source.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 32 Enter the user name to connect to the data source.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 23 Enter the alias for the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1c Enter the name of the query.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Ftime 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Fdate 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
39 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2FDateTimeDialog 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
36 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Falignment 9 Alignment
37 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fbottompage 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
34 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Ftoppage 14 Top of Page (Header)
35 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagenofm b Page N of M
32 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagen 6 Page N
3d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2FPageNumberDialog 5d You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers.
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4d Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 54 Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs)
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1c Deletes the selected report.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 1a Deletes the selected form.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 1a Renames the selected form.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 1b Renames the selected query.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1c Renames the selected report.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 1b Deletes the selected query.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 43 Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1b Renames the selected table.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1b Deletes the selected table.
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
c FontWork2TBO 75 Внесете ја вредноста за растојанието на знаците од ТекстЕфекти.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 9a Кликнете за го примените растојанието на знаци на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 71 Го отвора прозорецот за Растојание на знаците од ТекстЕфекти.
c FontWork1TBO 91 Кликнете за да го примените порамнувањето на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 5a Го отвора прозорецот Порамнување на ТекстЕфекти.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights c8 Ја менува висината на буквите на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти од нормална на иста висина за сите објекти.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes ee Го отвора алатникот Облик на ТекстЕфекти. Кликнете на некој од облиците за да го примените на сите избрани објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2Fshare dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2FShareDocumentDialog 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit c3 Ако кликнете на копчето Затвори на лентата со алатки Филтер на формулари формуларот е прикажан без филтер.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute e7 Ако кликнете на Примени филтри базирани на формулари иконата на Филтер за формулари лентата со алатки, ќе се примени филтерот.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2FNewToolbarDialog 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 2bd Условите за филтри кои се поставени се појавуваат во Навигатор за филтри. По поставувањето на филтерот, ќе видите празен запис на крајот од Навигатор за филтри . Можете да го изберете овој запис со кликање на зборот "Или". По избирањето на празниот запис, можете да внесете додатни услови за филтри во формуларот. Овие услови се поврзани со Логичко ИЛИ со претходно дефинираните услови.
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator de За да поврзете неколку услови за филтрирање со Логичко ИЛИ кликнете на иконата Навигација на филтри на лентата со филтри.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 99 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Graphics Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
1c .uno%3APreviousTrackedChange 41 Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any.
18 .uno%3ANextTrackedChange 3d Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 35 The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 3c The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 sfx2%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fall_recent 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
25 sfx2%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2FStartCenter 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AExtensions 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
1c .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AInfo 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
c .uno%3AAbout a2 Прикажува општи информации за програмата како што се број на верзијата и авторски права.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate ee Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 34 Displays the Licensing and Legal information dialog.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 4f Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 88 Ја отвора главната страница на помошта за $[officename] за активната апликација.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits d3 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into LibreOffice) or LibreOffice since 2010-09-28.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu ac Менито за помош Ви овозможува да го стартувате и да управувате со системот за помош на $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 99 Овозможува проширени совети под покажувачот на глушецот сѐ до следното кликнување.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 76 Стандардниот алатник е достапен во секоја апликација од $[officename].
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar f7 Алатникот за табели содржи функции што Ви се потребни кога работите со табели. Се појавува кога ќе го придвижите покажувачот во табела.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns b0 Ги вметнува сите полиња од означениот запис во тековниот документ на позицијата на покажувачот.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 5b Брише запис. Треба да биде потврдено пред бришење.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 1f Креира нов запис.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 53 Ви овозможува да отповикате внес на податоци.
e .uno%3ARecSave 91 Зачувува нов запис со податоци. Промената е регистрирана во базата на податоци.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 33 Ве носи на последниот запис.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 2f Ве носи на следниот запис.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 2b Ве носи на првиот запис.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 35 Ве носи на претходниот запис.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord a1 Го прикажува бројот на тековниот запис. Внесете број за да отидете на соодветниот запис.
e .uno%3AGridUse 87 Одредува дека може да поместувате објекти само помеѓу точките од мрежата.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 6b Претвора аголна точка или симетрична точка во мазна точка.
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 6d Ја означува тековната точка или избраните точки за бришење.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 2e Затвора линија или крива.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 63 Ја претвора избраната точка или точки во аголни точки.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 79 Претвора крива во права линија или претвора права линија во крива.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 108 Иконата Раздели крива ја разделува кривата. Изберете ја точката или точките каде што сакате да ја разделите кривата и потоа кликнете на иконата.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete 145 Користете ја иконата Избриши точки за да избришете една или повеќе избрани точки. Ако сакате да изберете повеќе точки, кликнете ги соодветните точки додека го држите копчето Shift.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 7f Оваа икона претвора аголна точка или мазна точка во симетрична точка.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 93 Го активира режимот за вметнување. Овој режим Ви овозможува да вметнувате точки.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 5c Активира режим во кој можете да поместувате точки.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX bd Алатникот за уредување точки се појавува кога ќе изберете полигон (објект) и ќе кликнете на Уреди точки.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 38 Изберете елемент за уредување.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 93 Оваа наредба отвора дијалог за приспособување на програмата кон вашите потреби.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Femail 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffax 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fhome 63 Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот домашен телефонски број.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fposition 63 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата позиција во компанијата.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ftitle 43 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата титула.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstate 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fstate 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Femail 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcity 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ficity 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Ficity 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fzip 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Femail 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fizip 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstreet 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Ffax 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ficity 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fwork 66 Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот телефонски број на работа.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastshortname 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Flastname 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastlastname 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fizip 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffax 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastfirstname 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fruslastname 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fposition 63 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата позиција во компанијата.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Frusfirstname 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Frusshortname 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffirstname 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ftitle 43 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата титула.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fstreet 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcompany 59 Во ова поле впишете го името на Вашата компанија.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fizip 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstreet 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fshortname 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany 59 Во ова поле впишете го името на Вашата компанија.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2FOptUserPage 8c Користете ја оваа страница за да внесете или уредите податоци за корисникот.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fsaveas 16a Одредува дека документите од типот избран на левата страна секогаш ќе се зачувуваат како датотеки од овој тип. Може да изберете друг тип датотека за тековниот документ во дијалогот Зачувување како.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Falienwarndialog%2Fask 16f Може да изберете дали да добиете порака за предупредување кога зачувувате документ во формат којшто не е OpenDocument или ако не сте поставиле стандарден формат во Алатки - Опции - Вчитање/зачувување - Општо.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_inet 84 Обележете го полето за да имате релативно зачувување на URL-а на Интернет.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdoctype ab Го одредува типот на документ за кој сакате да го дефинирате стандардниот формат на датотека.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_fsys 97 Обележете го полето за да имате релативно зачувување на URL-а во датотечниот систем.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fuserautosave 8d Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves all open documents when saving auto recovery information. Uses the same time interval as AutoRecovery does.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave 154 Одредува дека %PRODUCTNAME ја зачувува информацијата потребна за обновување на сите отворени документи во случај на пад на програмата. Може да го зададете временскиот интервал на зачувување.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fbackup 1ae Ја зачувува претходната верзија на документот како резервна копија секој пат кога ќе го зачувате документот. Секогаш кога %PRODUCTNAME креира резервна копија, претходната резервна копија се заменува. Резервната копија ја има наставката .BAK.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fodfversion fc Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave_spin 8f Го одредува временскиот интервал во минути за опцијата за автоматско враќање.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdocinfo be Означува дека дијалогот Својства ќе се појавува секој пат кога ќе ја активирате наредбата Зачувај како.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fwarnalienformat 16f Може да изберете дали да добиете порака за предупредување кога зачувувате документ во формат којшто не е OpenDocument или ако не сте поставиле стандарден формат во Алатки - Опции - Вчитање/зачувување - Општо.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_docprinter 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_settings bd Поставувањата специфични за корисникот што се зачувани во документот, ги вчитува заедно со документот.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage ef Во делот Општо може да изберете стандардни поставувања за зачувување документи и може да изберете стандардни формати на датотеки.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fedit 84 Кликнете за да го прикажете дијалогот Избирање патека или Уреди патеки .
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fdefault bd Копчето Стандардно ги ресетира патеките на претходно дефинираните вредности за сите избрани елементи.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fpaths 65 To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2FOptPathsPage 75 This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH d6 Го отвора дијалогот Избирање патеки за да изберете друга папка или дијалогот Отворање за да изберете друга датотека.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH bb Содржи листа на патеки или што веќе биле додадени. Означете ја стандардната патека за новите датотеки.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 8e Автоматски го проверува правописот додека пишувате и ги подвлекува грешките.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 7a Ги дефинира опциите за проверка на правопис и разделување зборови.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoptions%2FBreakNumberOption 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsdelete 98 Го брише избраниот речник по потврдата, доколку истиот не е заштитен од запишување.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fdelete 64 Го брише означениот збор од тековниот сопствен речник.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fword 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
2c cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fnewreplace a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fbook 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fexcept 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
36 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2FEditDictionaryDialog 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Flanguage 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fnameedit 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
3a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2FOptNewDictionaryDialog 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsnew 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 51 Ги прикажува достапните кориснички речници.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptionsedit 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Freplace a6 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodulesedit 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Flang 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 49 Ги содржи инсталираните јазични модули.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 9a Ги одредува својствата на проверката на правопис, тезаурус и разделувањето зборови.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsedit 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 74 Кликнете тука за да ги отповикате тековните промени во листата.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 79 Го намалува за едно ниво приоритетот на модулот избран во листата.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 7b Го зголемува за едно ниво приоритетот на модулот избран во листата.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 39 Го одредува јазикот на модулот.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES dc Ги одредува јазикот и достапните проверка на правопис, разделување зборови и подмодули со тезауруси за избраниот модул.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE ce Го отвора дијалогот Зачувување како кој Ви овозможува да ја зачувате тековната табела со бои под зададеното име.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 2e Ја менува тековната боја.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 8b Го отвора дијалогот за Отворање кој Ви овозможува да изберете палета со бои.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 1f Додава нова боја.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 c Црвена
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL b8 За да го измените, изберете го моделот на бои: црвена-зелена-сина (RGB) или цијан-магента-жолта-црна (CMYK).
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 89 Содржи листа на достапни бои. За да изберете боја, изберете една од листата.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME cc Го одредува името на избраната боја. Исто така може и да го напишете името во ова поле кога дефинирате нова боја.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 8b Го отвора дијалогот за Отворање кој Ви овозможува да изберете палета со бои.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 8 Сина
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 c Зелена
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR bd Ви овозможува да изберете боја од табела со бои, да уредувате постоечка боја или да дефинирате нови бои.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 4f Ја поставува нијансата во моделот на бои HSB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 6e Ја поставува вредноста за црвената боја во моделот на бои RGB.
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 55 Ја поставува осветленоста во моделот на бои HSB.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 55 Го поставува заситувањето во моделот на бои HSB.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 8a Ја поставува вредноста за црната боја или клучот (црна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 8a Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „магента“ (пурпурна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 6d Ја поставува вредноста за жолтата боја во моделот на бои CMYK.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 8a Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „магента“ (пурпурна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 8b Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „цијан“ (сино-зелена) во моделот на бои CMYK.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 8a Ја поставува вредноста за црната боја или клучот (црна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 8b Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „цијан“ (сино-зелена) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 6a Ја поставува вредноста за сината боја во моделот на бои RGB.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 6e Ја поставува вредноста за зелената боја во моделот на бои RGB.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 145 Го поставува малиот покажувач за избор во десниот прозорец на бојата што одговара на избраната боја во левиот прозорец и ги ажурира соодветните вредности во нумеричките полиња.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 6d Ја поставува вредноста за жолтата боја во моделот на бои CMYK.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 146 Кликнете на копчето <-- за да ја замените избраната боја во палетата со бои со бојата избрана од десната страна. Копчето е овозможено кога ќе изберете боја во еден од четирите агли.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fyear 97 Го дефинира опсегот на датуми, во кој системот ги препознава годините со две цифри.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fdocstatus 6d Одредува дали печатењето на документот се смета за промена.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ffiledlg 10d Одредува дали се користат дијалозите на $[officename] за отворање и зачувување на документи. Во спротивно се користат дијалозите на оперативниот систем.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fexthelp c7 Прикажува текст за помош кога ќе застанете со покажувачот над икона, наредба од мени или контрола од дијалог.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftooltips 122 Ги прикажува имињата на иконите и повеќе совети во балончиња, како на пример белешки со примери и имиња на поглавјата кога се движите низ документ со поглавја.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 4f Ги одредува општите поставувања на $[officename].
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontheight 7a Изберете големина на фонт за приказот на изворни кодови на HTML и Basic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fnonpropfontonly a1 Обележете го ова за да ги прикажете само непропорционалните фонтови во листата Фонтови.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fdelete 35 Ја брише замената на фонтови.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont2 43 Внесете го името на фонтот за замена.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont1 78 Внесете или изберете го името на фонтот што сакате да го замените.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontname 69 Изберете го фонтот за приказ на изворни кодови на HTML и Basic.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fapply 35 Ја прави замената на фонтови.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fchecklb 1cf Ги прикажува оригиналниот фонт и фонтот што ќе го замени. Изберете Секогаш за да ги замените и екранскиот фонт и фонтот за печатење, дури и ако оригиналниот фонт е инсталиран на Вашиот систем. Изберете Само на екран за да го замените само екранскиот фонт.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fusetable 83 Ги овозможува поставувањата за замена на фонтови што сте ги дефинирале.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2FOptFontsPage 161 Заменува еден фонт со друг фонт по Ваш избор. Замената само менува фонт кога е прикажан на екранот или за време на печатење. Не го менува фонтот што е зададен во форматирањето на Вашиот документ.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 8b Одредува дали и како ќе се позиционира глувчето во новоотворените дијалози.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 7a Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL d1 Пристапува директно на хардверските можности на адаптерот за графички излез за да се подобри приказот на екранот.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION b0 If enabled, the text selection in Writer and the cell selection in Calc will be shown using a transparent color. If not enabled, the selection will be shown by inverted colors.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 94 Притиснете Shift+Ctrl+R за да го обновите или освежите приказот на тековниот документ.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView 142 Одредува дали да се обнови последниот користен изглед на документот. Многу од својствата за приказ што биле валидни кога документот бил последен пат зачуван ќе бидат обновени.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW db Ги прикажува имињата на фонтовите во соодветниот фонт, на пример, фонтовите во полето „Фонт“ на алатникот Форматирање.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS 66 Ги прикажува иконите до соодветните ставки од менијата.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT ed Ја одредува употребата на системските фонтови за прикажување на сите менија и дијалози. Инаку ќе се користи друг инсталиран фонт.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT ed Ја одредува употребата на системските фонтови за прикажување на сите менија и дијалози. Инаку ќе се користи друг инсталиран фонт.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 114 На почетокот на листата во полето Име на фонт во алатникот Форматирање ги прикажува последните пет фонтови што сте ги користеле во тековниот документ.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 62 Ја дефинира функцијата на средното копче на глувчето.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 59 Ја одредува големината на иконите на алатниците.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 10d Користи процентуална метрика за менување на големината на фонтот во елементите на корисничкиот интерфејс, како што се дијалози и натписи на икони.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 59 Ја одредува големината на иконите на алатниците.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 2e Одредува опции за приказ.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpaperorient 5e Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpapersize 58 Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fconverttogray 38 Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstripes 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmaptrans 75 If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapresol 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapnormal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapdpi 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransnone 2f With this option transparency is never printed.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransauto 76 Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstep 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetrans 135 Доколку го означите ова поле проѕирните објекти ќе бидат испечатени како и нормалните непроѕирни објекти, во зависност од вашиот избор во наредните две полиња за избор.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmap 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ffile c7 Одредува дали поставувањата за печатење се однесуваат на директното печатење или на печатењето во датотека.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradcolor 49 Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fprinter c7 Одредува дали поставувањата за печатење се однесуваат на директното печатење или на печатењето во датотека.
2d sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapoptimal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegrad 44 If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ftrans 69 Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2FOptPrintPage 3b Ги одредува опциите за печатење.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Folecache 79 Изберете го максималниот број на OLE-објекти што се чуваат во кешот.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fobjecttime 4f Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fobjectcache 64 Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fgraphiccache 30 Specifies the total cache size for all graphics.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fundo 5b You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the box.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemoryspage%2FOptMemoryPage a6 Ги дефинира поставувањата за кешот за графика и бројот на чекори кои може да ги отповикате.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorconfig 68 Ги избира боите за елементите на корисничкиот интерфејс.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fdelete af Ја брише шемата на бои што е прикажана во полето Шема. Не може да ја избришете стандардната шема.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 34 Внесете име за шемата за бои.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fsave a9 Ги зачувува тековните поставувања како шема на бои која може подоцна да ја вчитате повторно.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorschemelb 5c Ја избира шемата на бои што сакате да ја користите.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2FOptAppearancePage 67 Ги поставува боите за корисничкиот интерфејс на $[officename].
38 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fsystempagepreviewcolor af Ги применува поставувањата на оперативниот систем за висок контраст на прегледите на страници.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautodetecthc c4 %PRODUCTNAME се префрла во режим на висок контраст кога бојата на подлогата на оперативниот систем е многу темна.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftiphelptimeoutnf 77 Внесете го бројот на секунди за прикажување на советите за помош.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftiphelptimeout 61 Ги крие советите за помош по одредениот број секунди.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedtext 7a Прегледува анимиран текст како што е трепкање и движење, во %PRODUCTNAME.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautofontcolor da Ги прикажува фонтовите во %PRODUCTNAME преку поставувањата на системските бои. Оваа опција влијае само на екранскиот приказ.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedgraphics 77 Ги прегледува анимираните графики, како што се GIF-слики во %PRODUCTNAME.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftextselinreadonly 6e Го прикажува покажувачот во документи што се само за читање.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Facctool 1d9 Ви овозможува да користите алатки за помагање, како што се надворешни читачи на екран, Брајови уреди или уреди за препознавање на говор. За да имате поддршка за алатки за помагање, на Вашиот компјутер треба да биде инсталирана Јава-околината за извршување (JRE).
36 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2FOptAccessibilityPage 104 Поставува опции коишто ги прават програмите на %PRODUCTNAME попристапни за корисници со намален вид, ограничена способност или други ограничувања.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftpport 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttpport 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttpsport 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fnoproxy a8 Ги одредува имињата на серверите за кои не се потребни прокси-сервери, разделени со запирки.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftp 4d Напишете го името на прокси-серверот за FTP.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttps 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttp 4e Напишете го името на прокси-серверот за HTTP.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fproxymode 4d Го одредува типот на дефиниција на прокси.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2FOptProxyPage 4d Го одредува типот на дефиниција на прокси.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptbrowserpage%2Fdisplay c4 Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptbrowserpage%2FOptBrowserPage c4 Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmacro 4a Го отвора дијалогот Безбедност на макро.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fchange 51 Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fremove 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
40 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2FStoredWebConnectionDialog 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2FMasterPasswordDialog 26 Enter the master password to continue.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 20 Enter the master password again.
39 cui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2FSetMasterPasswordDialog 1a Enter the master password.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmasterpassword 27 Opens the Enter Master Password dialog.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fconnections 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fpassword 127 Изберете за опцијата Зачувај со лозинка во дијалогот за зачувување да биде стандардно избрана. Исклучете ја опцијата за да ги зачувувате датотеките без лозинка.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 1a Enter the master password.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fremovepersonal 1b5 Изберете корисничките податоци секогаш да се отстрануваат од својствата на документот. Ако оваа опција не е избрана, сепак ќе може да ги отстраните личните информации од тековниот документ со копчето Избриши од Датотека - Својства - Општо.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fsavepassword bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhensigning 181 Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да потпишете документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, полиња, референци до други извори (на пример, поврзани делови или поврзани слики) или белешки.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fsavesenddocs 10a Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да зачувате или да испратите документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, или белешки.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenprinting e0 Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да испечатите документ којшто содржи снимени промени или белешки.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2FSecurityOptionsDialog 10a Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да зачувате или да испратите документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, или белешки.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenpdf 11f Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да изнесете документ којшто содржи снимени промени во Writer или којшто прикажува белешки, во PDF-формат.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Foptions 10a Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да зачувате или да испратите документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, или белешки.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fremoveall 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fctrlclick 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2FOptSecurityPage c1 Ги дефинира опциите за безбедност за зачувување документи и за отворање документи коишто содржат макроа.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasicwarning 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasic 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsavegrflocal dd Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fexport 32 Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Funknowntag 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize5 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fcharset 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize4 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize3 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fprintextension 75 Ако го изберете ова поле, ќе биде изнесен и изгледот за печатење.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize2 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fnumbersenglishus 19b Ако не е избрано, броевите ќе бидат интерпретирани според поставувањето во Алатки - Опции - Поставувања за јазик - Јазик на - Поставување за локал. Ако е обележано, броевите ќе се интерпретираат според локалот „Англиски (САД)“.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fignorefontnames 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize1 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize6 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2FOptHtmlPage 20 Defines settings for HTML pages.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions 143 Овие поставувања одредуваат на кој начин се ракува со текстуалните документи креирани во $[officename]. Исто така може да се дефинираат поставувања за тековниот текстуален документ.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fmeasureunit 46 Ја одредува единицата за HTML-документи.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fcomments 138 Ги прикажува белешките и скриптите што ги содржи документот. Белешките ќе бидат прикажани како обоени полиња. Кликнете двапати на некое од нив за да ги читате и уредувате.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ffieldcodes 91 Ги прикажува имињата на полињата во документот наместо содржината на полињата.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fdrawings 78 Ги прикажува цртежите и контролите што ги содржи Вашиот документ.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ftables 5d Ги прикажува табелите содржани во Вашиот документ.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvruler a3 Го прикажува вертикалниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhruler a7 Го прикажува хоризонталниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fgraphics 70 Одредува дали да се прикажуваат графики и објекти на екранот.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fruler b7 Ги вклучува линијарите. Користете ги следните две полиња за да изберете кои линијари да се прикажат.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 13c За да ги прикажете границите на табелите, кликнете со десното копче на која било табела и изберете Граници на табелa или во документ од Writer изберете Tабела - Граници на табелa.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvscrollbar 50 Ја прикажува вертикалната лента за движење.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulerright 61 Го порамнува вертикалниот линијар со десната страна.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulercombobox a3 Го прикажува вертикалниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhscrollbar 54 Ја прикажува хоризонталната лента за движење.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhrulercombobox a7 Го прикажува хоризонталниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fsmoothscroll 60 Ја активира функцијата за мазно движење на страници.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhelplines ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2FViewOptionsPage 124 Ги дефинира стандардните поставувања за прикажување објекти во Вашите текстуални документи исто така и стандардните поставувања за елементите на прозорците.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fidxbox 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelbox 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistbox 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitlebox 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Findexheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fdoconly 3f Specifies that the settings apply to the current document only.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitleheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistheight 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardbox 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2FOptFontTabPage 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fblankpages 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fend 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fonly 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fnone 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ffax 11f Доколку сте инсталирале софтвер за факс на Вашиот компјутер и сакате да испратите факс директно од текстуалниот документ, тука изберете ја машината за факс.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frtl 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbrochure 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frightpages 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ftextplaceholder 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fendpage 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fleftpages 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fpapertray a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fformcontrols 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Finblack 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fgraphics 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fhiddentext 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2FPrintOptionsPage 7e Ги одредува поставувањата за печатење во текстуален или HTML-документ.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbackground 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffixprop 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolinsert 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumalignment 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fvar 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolmove 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumformatting 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffix 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fborder 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumfmtformatting 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fdontsplit 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frepeatheader 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowinsert 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fheader 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowmove 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2FOptTablePage 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffilltab 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddenparafield 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursorinprot 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentextfield 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillmargin 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursoronoff 1c Activates the direct cursor.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentext 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillindent 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fbreak 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillspace 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ftabs 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fspaces 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhyphens 166 Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fnonbreak af Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fparagraph 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2FOptFormatAidsPage 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkcolor 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkpos 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchangedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeletedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsertcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchanged 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeleted ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsert 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2FOptRedLinePage 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftab 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatecharts be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fonrequest 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fusecharunit 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fmetric 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Frequestrb 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatefields c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Falways 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fnever 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fneverrb 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falwaysrb 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fsquaremode 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2Fdefault 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2FOptCompatPage 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcharstyle 1e Specifies the character style.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fposition 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumbering 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcategory 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fobjects 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fapplyborder 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Flevel 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2FOptCaptionPage 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 0 
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsynchronize 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisionx 4c Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the X-axis.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisiony 4c Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the Y-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawy 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawx 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fgridvisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 0 
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fusegridsnap 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2FOptGridPage cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Foutline 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvscroll 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Ftblreg 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frangefind bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fobjgrf 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fhscroll 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fanchor 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvalue 111 Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 59 To display a note permanently, select the Show note command from the cell's context menu.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fformula 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fnil 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fannot d1 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdraw 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdiagram 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fclipmark f3 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fsynczoom 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fguideline 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fcolor 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frowcolheader 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fbreak 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fgrid db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2FTpViewPage 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Freplwarncb 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftextfmtcb 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fmarkhdrcb 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fformatcb 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Feditmodecb 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falignlb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fexprefcb f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Faligncb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftabmf 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Funitlb 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2FScGeneralPage 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fadd 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdiscard 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fnew 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fcopy 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fcopyfrom 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fentries 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Flists 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2FOptSortLists 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 56 Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 50 Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fprec ae Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fgeneralprec dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Flookup 7d Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fregex 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fmatch 6d Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcalc 57 Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcase 64 Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatesc10 62 Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatestd 1c Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fminchange a1 Specifies the difference between two iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdate1904 63 Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fsteps 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fiterate b1 Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2FOptCalculatePage fb Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fentries 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Finsertions 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fdeletions 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fchanges 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2FOptChangesPage 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FprintCB e3 Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FsuppressCB 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FoptCalcPrintPage 6a Ги одредува опциите за печатење за табеларните пресметки.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcompatibilitypage%2FOptCompatibilityPage 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptformula%2FOptFormula 35 Defines formula syntax options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdefaultpage%2FOptDefaultPage 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions db Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out, and if notes and handouts are always printed.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fmoveoutline 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fhandlesbezier ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fdragstripes 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fruler 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2FSdViewPage 26 Specifies the available display modes.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldangle 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
1e svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fortho 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
1f svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Frotate 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnappoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldbezangle 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
21 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fbigortho 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
22 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapframe 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
26 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnaphelplines 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapborder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldsnaparea cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3a Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpapertryfrmprntrcb 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffrontcb 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbrouchrb 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagedefaultrb 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbackcb 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fblackwhiterb 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffittopgrb 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fgrayscalerb 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftilepgrb a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fhiddenpgcb 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdefaultrb 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftimecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdatecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagenmcb 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fprntopts 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FstrtwithPag 4e Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FscaleBox 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FmetricFields 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Funits 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fdistrotcb 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fobjalwymov a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fbackgroundback 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FcbCompatibility 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fcopywhenmove 69 Specifies whether to automatically create a copy when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Ftextselected 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fstartwithwizard 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 5d Specifies whether to immediately switch to the text editing mode when clicking a text object.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fqickedit 5d Specifies whether to immediately switch to the text editing mode when clicking a text object.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FOptSavePage 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fnorightspaces 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fzoom 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizenormal 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizescaled 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftext 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftitle 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizezoomed 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fframe 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2FSmathSettings 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fdefault 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fcolors 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2FOptChartColorsPage 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_saveorig 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_saveorig 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_saveorig 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2FOptFltrPage 61 Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA code.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fchecklbcontainer ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasiansupport 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrentdoc 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcomplexlanguage 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasianlanguage 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fwesternlanguage 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fignorelanguagechange dd Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdatepatterns cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fctlsupport 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrencylb 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdecimalseparator 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fuserinterface 58 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Flocalesetting 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2FOptLanguagesPage 4b Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fend 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Flanguage 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctkanacompression 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstart 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctcompression 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fnocompression 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharpunctkerning 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharkerning 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstandard 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2FOptAsianPage 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignorepunctuation 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchprolongedsoundmark 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchkiku 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchiaiya 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchseshezeje 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchdiziduzu 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatcholdkanaforms 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchvariantformkanji 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchminusdashchoon 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchrepeatcharmarks 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignoremiddledot 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchcontractions 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchbavahafa 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchhiraganakatakana 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchtsithichidhizi 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchfullhalfwidth 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchcase 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchhyuiyubyuvyu 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignorewhitespace 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2FOptJSearchPage 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fnumerals ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementvisual 54 The text cursor moves to the right with Arrow Right and to the left with Arrow Left.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementlogical 5d The text cursor moves to the text end with Arrow Right and to the text begin with Arrow Left.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Frestricted 4b Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fsequencechecking 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2FOptCTLPage 3c Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Ftimeout 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fenablepooling 73 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fconnectionpooling 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fedit 3a Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fdelete 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fnew 35 Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 52 Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 3b Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fparameters 27 Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fadd 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fclasspath 1c Opens the Class Path dialog.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavas 24 Select the JRE that you want to use.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavaenabled 40 Allows you to run Java applications and applets in %PRODUCTNAME.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Fremove 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Ffolder 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Farchive 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Fpaths 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
2a cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fremovebtn 29 Deletes the selected JRE start parameter.
2a cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fassignbtn 31 Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list.
2b cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fassignlist 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
2f cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fparameterfield 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fmed e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
26 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fhigh bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Flow c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fvhigh 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2FSecurityLevelPage 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovefile 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
29 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Faddfile 5e Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
2b xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Flocations c4 Trusted file locations are used only if the security level is set to "very high". With this setting, document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovecert 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fviewcert 3f Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fcertificates 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2FSecurityTrustPage 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserverauthentication 72 Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fport 14 Enter the SMTP port.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Ftest 44 Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserver 1b Enter the SMTP server name.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplyto 2c Enter the address to use for e-mail replies.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplytocb 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Faddress 26 Enter your e-mail address for replies.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fdisplayname 10 Enter your name.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fsecure 39 When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2FMailConfigPage 10 Enter your name.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchecknow 35 Проверката ќе се изведе сега.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feverymonth 4a Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш месечно.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryweek 81 Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш неделно. Ова е стандардно поставување.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryday 48 Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш дневно.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautocheck 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
34 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2FOptOnlineUpdatePage 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fimap 32 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finusername 28 Enter the user name for the IMAP server.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fpop3 33 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fserver 38 Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fsmtpafterpop 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
43 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Foutpassword 25 Enter the password for the user name.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finpassword 13 Enter the password.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fport 2a Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fusername 28 Enter the user name for the SMTP server.
4e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fseperateauthentication 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
46 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fauthentication 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
54 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2FAuthenticationSettingsDialog 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Fstop 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Ferrors 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2FTestMailSettings 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 61 The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate.
